<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=CitadelUK</id>
	<title>Board Game Arena - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=CitadelUK"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/Special:Contributions/CitadelUK"/>
	<updated>2026-09-16T09:49:12Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.39.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=21878</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=21878"/>
		<updated>2024-07-17T10:08:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Clarify that gold is kept face up publicly in a player’s gold collection&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc. The cards in player’s hand is private information known only to them and not shared with other players including their partner.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; can be played as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick. Gold cards can be spent to swap players&#039; bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank. If a player played the lowest base metal card in a trick, they win a gold card of the same number (rank), if available in the gold supply. There are 2 copies each of gold cards numbered 1, 2 and 3 worth 1 point each at the end of a round; 1 copy each of 4, 5 and 6 worth 2 points; 1 copy each of 7 and 8 worth 3 points each. There are four 0 gold cards worth 0 points given to each player at the start of each round in the base game. Gold cards a player holds are kept publicly in front of a player face up in their gold collection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Dealing&#039;&#039;&#039; where base metal cards are dealt evenly to players and gold is returned to the supply. Each player receives a 0 gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick. The lowest base metal card wins a gold card and starts the next trick.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dealing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Each player receives a 0 gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; at the start of each round (except in the Expert Variant). This card is placed face up in front of a player in their gold collection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039;. These base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly face down between the three players at the beginning of each round. The gold supply contains all gold cards from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039; at the start of each round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and all gold cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039; at the start of each round. Two random base metal cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round. The remaining base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly face down between the four players at the beginning of each round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a &#039;&#039;&#039;base metal card from their hand&#039;&#039;&#039; whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must &#039;&#039;&#039;start with any base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039;: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. &#039;&#039;&#039;Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played&#039;&#039;&#039;. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This gold card is placed face up in front of a player in their gold collection. This player will be the &#039;&#039;&#039;start player for the next trick&#039;&#039;&#039; played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, &#039;&#039;&#039;the last card played of the tied cards wins&#039;&#039;&#039;. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick, wins the gold card and will play first in the next trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with. A team&#039;s bid is compared to the combined total of tricks taken by both partners in that team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=21787</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=21787"/>
		<updated>2024-07-09T00:29:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Avoiding repetition&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; can be played as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick. Gold cards can be spent to swap players&#039; bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank. If a player played the lowest base metal card in a trick, they win a gold card of the same number (rank), if available in the gold supply. There are 2 copies each of gold cards numbered 1, 2 and 3 worth 1 point each at the end of a round; 1 copy each of 4, 5 and 6 worth 2 points; 1 copy each of 7 and 8 worth 3 points each. There are four 0 gold cards worth 0 points given to each player at the start of each round in the base game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Dealing&#039;&#039;&#039; where base metal cards are dealt evenly to players and gold is returned to the supply. Each player receives a 0 gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick. The lowest base metal card wins a gold card and starts the next trick.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dealing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Each player receives a 0 gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; at the start of each round (except in the Expert Variant). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039;. These base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the three players at the beginning of each round. The gold supply contains all gold cards from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039; at the start of each round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and all gold cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039; at the start of each round. Two random base metal cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round. The remaining base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the four players at the beginning of each round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a &#039;&#039;&#039;base metal card from their hand&#039;&#039;&#039; whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must &#039;&#039;&#039;start with any base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039;: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. &#039;&#039;&#039;Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played&#039;&#039;&#039;. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the &#039;&#039;&#039;start player for the next trick&#039;&#039;&#039; played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, &#039;&#039;&#039;the last card played of the tied cards wins&#039;&#039;&#039;. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick, wins the gold card and will play first in the next trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with. A team&#039;s bid is compared to the combined total of tricks taken by both partners in that team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=21786</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=21786"/>
		<updated>2024-07-09T00:22:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Missing s&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; can be played as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick. Gold cards can be spent to swap players&#039; bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank. If a player played the lowest base metal card in a trick, they win a gold card of the same number (rank), if available in the gold supply. There are 2 copies each of gold cards numbered 1, 2 and 3 worth 1 point each at the end of a round; 1 copy each of 4, 5 and 6 worth 2 points; 1 copy each of 7 and 8 worth 3 points each. There are four 0 gold cards worth 0 points given to each player at the start of each round in the base game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Dealing&#039;&#039;&#039; where base metal cards are dealt evenly to players and gold is returned to the supply. Each player receives a 0 gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick. The lowest base metal card wins a gold card and starts the next trick.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dealing ==&lt;br /&gt;
All &#039;&#039;&#039;base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly&#039;&#039;&#039; to all players (two cards are left over in the 4 player game). All gold is returned to the supply. &#039;&#039;&#039;Each player receives a 0 gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; (except in the Expert Variant). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039;. These base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the three players at the beginning of each round. The gold supply contains all gold cards from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and all gold cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two random base metal cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round. The remaining base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the four players at the beginning of each round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a &#039;&#039;&#039;base metal card from their hand&#039;&#039;&#039; whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must &#039;&#039;&#039;start with any base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039;: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. &#039;&#039;&#039;Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played&#039;&#039;&#039;. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the &#039;&#039;&#039;start player for the next trick&#039;&#039;&#039; played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, &#039;&#039;&#039;the last card played of the tied cards wins&#039;&#039;&#039;. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick, wins the gold card and will play first in the next trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with. A team&#039;s bid is compared to the combined total of tricks taken by both partners in that team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=21785</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=21785"/>
		<updated>2024-07-09T00:19:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Clarifying dealing&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; can be played as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick. Gold cards can be spent to swap players&#039; bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank. If a player played the lowest base metal card in a trick, they win a gold card of the same number (rank), if available in the gold supply. There are 2 copies each of gold cards numbered 1, 2 and 3 worth 1 point each at the end of a round; 1 copy each of 4, 5 and 6 worth 2 points; 1 copy each of 7 and 8 worth 3 points each. There are four 0 gold cards worth 0 points given to each player at the start of each round in the base game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Dealing&#039;&#039;&#039; where base metal cards are dealt evenly to player and gold is returned to the supply. Each player receives a 0 gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick. The lowest base metal card wins a gold card and starts the next trick.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dealing ==&lt;br /&gt;
All &#039;&#039;&#039;base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly&#039;&#039;&#039; to all players (two cards are left over in the 4 player game). All gold is returned to the supply. &#039;&#039;&#039;Each player receives a 0 gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; (except in the Expert Variant). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039;. These base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the three players at the beginning of each round. The gold supply contains all gold cards from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and all gold cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two random base metal cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round. The remaining base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the four players at the beginning of each round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a &#039;&#039;&#039;base metal card from their hand&#039;&#039;&#039; whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must &#039;&#039;&#039;start with any base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039;: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. &#039;&#039;&#039;Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played&#039;&#039;&#039;. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the &#039;&#039;&#039;start player for the next trick&#039;&#039;&#039; played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, &#039;&#039;&#039;the last card played of the tied cards wins&#039;&#039;&#039;. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick, wins the gold card and will play first in the next trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with. A team&#039;s bid is compared to the combined total of tricks taken by both partners in that team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=21554</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=21554"/>
		<updated>2024-06-19T06:34:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Clarify trick ties rule&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; can be played as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick. Gold cards can be spent to swap players&#039; bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank. If a player played the lowest base metal card in a trick, they win a gold card of the same number (rank), if available in the gold supply. There are 2 copies each of gold cards numbered 1, 2 and 3 worth 1 point each at the end of a round; 1 copy each of 4, 5 and 6 worth 2 points; 1 copy each of 7 and 8 worth 3 points each. There are four 0 gold cards worth 0 points given to each player at the start of each round in the base game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039;. These base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the three players at the beginning of each round. The gold supply contains all gold cards from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and all gold cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two random base metal cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round. The remaining base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the four players at the beginning of each round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a &#039;&#039;&#039;base metal card from their hand&#039;&#039;&#039; whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must &#039;&#039;&#039;start with any base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039;: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. &#039;&#039;&#039;Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played&#039;&#039;&#039;. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the &#039;&#039;&#039;start player for the next trick&#039;&#039;&#039; played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, &#039;&#039;&#039;the last card played of the tied cards wins&#039;&#039;&#039;. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick, wins the gold card and will play first in the next trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with. A team&#039;s bid is compared to the combined total of tricks taken by both partners in that team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=21496</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=21496"/>
		<updated>2024-06-10T16:36:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Resolving Trick Ties - adding clarification&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; can be played as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick. Gold cards can be spent to swap players&#039; bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank. If a player played the lowest base metal card in a trick, they win a gold card of the same number (rank), if available in the gold supply. There are 2 copies each of gold cards numbered 1, 2 and 3 worth 1 point each at the end of a round; 1 copy each of 4, 5 and 6 worth 2 points; 1 copy each of 7 and 8 worth 3 points each. There are four 0 gold cards worth 0 points given to each player at the start of each round in the base game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039;. These base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the three players at the beginning of each round. The gold supply contains all gold cards from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and all gold cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two random base metal cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round. The remaining base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the four players at the beginning of each round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a &#039;&#039;&#039;base metal card from their hand&#039;&#039;&#039; whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must &#039;&#039;&#039;start with any base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039;: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. &#039;&#039;&#039;Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played&#039;&#039;&#039;. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the &#039;&#039;&#039;start player for the next trick&#039;&#039;&#039; played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, &#039;&#039;&#039;the last card played breaks the tie and wins&#039;&#039;&#039;. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick, wins the gold card and will play first in the next trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with. A team&#039;s bid is compared to the combined total of tricks taken by both partners in that team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Options_and_preferences:_gameoptions.json,_gamepreferences.json&amp;diff=21451</id>
		<title>Options and preferences: gameoptions.json, gamepreferences.json</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Options_and_preferences:_gameoptions.json,_gamepreferences.json&amp;diff=21451"/>
		<updated>2024-06-05T12:18:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Add warning that player_preferences may not contain preferences for some players.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Studio_Framework_Navigation}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;gameoptions.json&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you can define your game options (i.e. game variants).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;gamepreferences.json&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you can define user preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
   &lt;br /&gt;
Note: If your game has no variants or preferences, you don&#039;t have to modify these files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IMPORTANT:&#039;&#039;&#039; after edits to these files, you have to go to the control panel and press &amp;quot;Reload game options configuration&amp;quot; on Studio for your changes &#039;&#039;&#039;to take effect&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure you understand difference between options and preferences:&lt;br /&gt;
* Game options - something usually in the rule book defined as &amp;quot;variant&amp;quot; (except for player count, which is automatically handled). For example, whether to include &#039;&#039;The River&#039;&#039; in Carcassonne.&lt;br /&gt;
* User preferences - personal choices of each player only visible to that specific player - i.e. layout, whether or not to prompt for action, whether or not auto-opt in in some actions, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Game options are selected by the table creator and usually correspond to game variants, for example if the game includes expansions or certain special rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These variants are defined in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;gameoptions.json&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; as an object:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  {&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;quot;100&amp;quot;: { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Game Setup&amp;quot;, ... },&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;quot;101&amp;quot;: { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Draft&amp;quot;, ... }&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each key corresponds to the option id, and each value is that option definition, which is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; the file must be valid [https://www.json.org/ JSON]. That is, trailing commas and comments are not allowed. However you can use still standard json hack to add a field like &amp;quot;$comment&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Here we go&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note 2:&#039;&#039;&#039; the key in json file must be a string type, even its correspond to a number in other places (such as php, or other references in same json).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All options defined in this file should have a corresponding &amp;quot;game state label&amp;quot; with the same ID (see &amp;quot;initGameStateLabels&amp;quot; in yourgame.game.php)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
             self::initGameStateLabels ([&lt;br /&gt;
                        ...&lt;br /&gt;
                        &amp;quot;my_game_variant&amp;quot; =&amp;gt; 100,&lt;br /&gt;
              ]);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numbers have to be exactly from 100 to 199 (there can be gaps).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is how you access them during runtime (by name):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    public function isSecondVariant() {&lt;br /&gt;
        return $this-&amp;gt;getGameStateValue(&#039;my_game_variant&#039;) == 2;&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or this (by numberic id)&lt;br /&gt;
    $this-&amp;gt;gamestate-&amp;gt;table_globals[100]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access json data (the metadata only) can use&lt;br /&gt;
   $game_options = $this-&amp;gt;getTableOptions();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Details of game options format ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following are the values of the option definition object:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039; - &#039;&#039;&#039;mandatory&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name of the option visible for table creator. This is automatically marked for translation.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;values&#039;&#039;&#039; - &#039;&#039;&#039;mandatory&#039;&#039;&#039;. The map representing possible values of this option. The key of the map is possible value of this option, its a number but has to be string in json. The value is an object descring it.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039; - &#039;&#039;&#039;mandatory&#039;&#039;&#039;. String representation of the numeric value visible to table creator. This is automatically marked for translation.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;description&#039;&#039;&#039; - String description of this value to use when the name of the option is not self-explanatory. Displayed at the table under the option when this value is selected. Note: if there is no description, this should be omitted.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;tmdisplay&#039;&#039;&#039; - String representation of the option visible in the table description in the lobby. Usually if a variant values are On and Off (default), the tmdisplay would be same as description name when On, and nothing (empty string) when Off. (&#039;&#039;&#039;Warning&#039;&#039;&#039;: due to some caching, a change in tmdisplay may not be effective immediately in the studio, even after forcing a reload of options.) &#039;&#039;&#039;Pro Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can use this as a pre-game communication by adding fake options that just do nothing in the game but make it easier to find other player wanted the same game configuration (see the crew deep sea for example).&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;nobeginner&#039;&#039;&#039; - Set to true if not recommended for beginners&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;firstgameonly&#039;&#039;&#039; - Set to true if this option is recommended only for the first game (discovery option)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;beta&#039;&#039;&#039; - Set to true to indicate that this option is in &amp;quot;beta&amp;quot; development stage (there will be a warning for players starting the game)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;alpha&#039;&#039;&#039; - Set to true to indicate that this option is in &amp;quot;alpha&amp;quot; development stage (there will be a warning, and starting the game will be allowed only in training mode except for the developer)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;premium&#039;&#039;&#039; - Option can be only used by premium members&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;default&#039;&#039;&#039; - indicates the default value to use for this option (optional, if not present the first value listed is the default)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;displaycondition&#039;&#039;&#039; - (array of conditions) - checks the conditions before displaying the option for selection. All (or any) conditions must be true for the option to be displayed. All or any depends on value of displayconditionoperand&lt;br /&gt;
Supported display condition types:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;minplayers&#039;&#039; condition ensures at least this many players (Note: if your game works with a disjoint interval of player counts, you can supply an array of valid counts instead of a single value)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;maxplayers&#039;&#039; condition ensures at most this many players&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;otheroption&#039;&#039; condition ensures another option is set to given values. &lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;otheroptionisnot&#039;&#039; condition ensure another option is NOT set to this given values&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;displayconditionoperand&#039;&#039;&#039; - can be &#039;and&#039; (this is the default) or &#039;or&#039;. Allows to change the behaviour to display the option if one of the conditions is true instead of all of them.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;startcondition&#039;&#039;&#039; - (map from value to conditions array) - checks the conditions (on options VALUES) before starting the game. All conditions must be true for the game to start, otherwise players will get a red error message when attempting to begin the game. &lt;br /&gt;
Supported start condition types:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;minplayers&#039;&#039; condition ensures at least this many players (an array of values is not supported here)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;maxplayers&#039;&#039; condition ensures at most this many players&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;otheroption&#039;&#039; conditions ensure another option is set to this given values. That works the same as in &#039;&#039;&#039;displaycondition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;otheroptionisnot&#039;&#039; conditions ensure another option is NOT set to this given value.  That works the same as in &#039;&#039;&#039;displaycondition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*: For all these condition types, a &#039;&#039;gamestartonly&#039;&#039; boolean option can be added, if you have options that are exclusive. Setting this boolean to &#039;&#039;true&#039;&#039; will defer the evaluation of the startcondition to the game creation, instead of preventing the player to select options that are exclusive at all. See [[#gamestartonly|below]] for an example. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background: #FFCDD2; color: #B71C1C; padding: 2px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;But this should never be used -- see the warning below&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;notdisplayedmessage&#039;&#039;&#039; - if option is not suppose to be visible because of displaycondition but this is set, the text will be visible instead of combo drop down&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;level&#039;&#039;&#039; - what kind of option it is: &#039;&#039;base&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;major&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;additional&#039;&#039;. See [[#level|below]] for more informations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Common (reserved) options for all tables (reserved range 200-299):&lt;br /&gt;
*201 (const GAMESTATE_RATING_MODE) - ELO OFF (aka Training mode), &lt;br /&gt;
**0 = Normal&lt;br /&gt;
**1 = Training&lt;br /&gt;
**2 = Arena&lt;br /&gt;
*200 (const GAMESTATE_CLOCK_MODE) - game speed profile&lt;br /&gt;
**[0, 1, 2] - realtime (technically &amp;lt;10 realtime but you cannot define range in php)&lt;br /&gt;
**values &amp;gt;=10 - turn based (currently 10..21)&lt;br /&gt;
**Note there are two similar values, 9 = realtime &amp;quot;no time limit with friends only&amp;quot; vs. 20 = turn-based &amp;quot;no time limit with friends only&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;100&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Game Variant&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;values&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Learning&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;firstgameonly&amp;quot;: true,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;tmdisplay&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Learning&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
      },&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;2&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Base&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
      },&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;3&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Extended&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;nobeginner&amp;quot;: true,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;beta&amp;quot;: true,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;tmdisplay&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Extended&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    },&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;default&amp;quot;: 2&lt;br /&gt;
  },&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;101&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Draft variant&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;values&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;No draft&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
      },&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;2&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Draft&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;tmdisplay&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Draft&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;premium&amp;quot;: true,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;nobeginner&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    },&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;displaycondition&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
      {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;otheroption&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;id&amp;quot;: 100,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: [ 2, 3 ]&lt;br /&gt;
      },&lt;br /&gt;
      {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;otheroption&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;id&amp;quot;: 201,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: 1&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    ],&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;startcondition&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: [],&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;2&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
        {&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;maxplayers&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: 3,&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;message&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Draft option is available for 3 players maximum.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
      ]&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
  },&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;102&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Takeovers&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;values&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;2&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;No takeover&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
      },&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Allow takeovers&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;tmdisplay&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Takeovers&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;premium&amp;quot;: true,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;nobeginner&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    },&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;displaycondition&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
      {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;otheroption&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;id&amp;quot;: 100,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: [ 3 ]&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    ],&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;startcondition&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;2&amp;quot;: [],&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
        {&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;maxplayers&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: 2,&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;message&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Rebel vs Imperium Takeover Scenario is available for 2 players only.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
      ]&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example of option that condition on ELO off:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 {&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;quot;100&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Learning Game (No Research)&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;quot;values&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
       &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Off&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;quot;tmdisplay&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
       },&lt;br /&gt;
       &amp;quot;2&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;On&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;quot;tmdisplay&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Learning Game&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
       }&lt;br /&gt;
     },&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;quot;displaycondition&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
       {&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;otheroption&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;quot;id&amp;quot;: 201,&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: 1&lt;br /&gt;
       }&lt;br /&gt;
     ],&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;quot;notdisplayedmessage&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Learning variant available only in friendly mode&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
   }&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example of condition that is only available for REALTIME game mode:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;displaycondition&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
    { &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;otheroption&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;id&amp;quot;: 200, &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: [0, 1, 2] }&lt;br /&gt;
],&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example of using condition on your own option:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;102&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Scenarios&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;values&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Off&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;nobeginner&amp;quot;: false&lt;br /&gt;
      },&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;2&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;On&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;tmdisplay&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Scenarios&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;nobeginner&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    },&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;displaycondition&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
      {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;otheroptionisnot&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;id&amp;quot;: 100,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: 1&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    ],&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;notdisplayedmessage&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Scenarios variant is not available if Learning variant is chosen&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example of handling solo vs multiplayer options:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;100&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Board setup&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;values&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Mirror setup&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The starting player shuffles their 6 Farm Cards and randomly lays a card face up in each of the round spaces of their Fruit Island Board. The other players then lay their cards in exactly the same way, copying the order of the starting player.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;tmdisplay&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Mirror setup&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
      },&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;2&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Random setup&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Instead of every player copying the same card configuration as the starting player, every player shuffles their Farm Cards and lays down the cards randomly on their Fruit Island Board.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;tmdisplay&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Random setup&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    },&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;displaycondition&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
      {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;minplayers&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
          2,&lt;br /&gt;
          3,&lt;br /&gt;
          4&lt;br /&gt;
        ]&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    ]&lt;br /&gt;
  },&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;102&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Solo difficulty&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;values&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
      {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Banana-apprentice&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Do not remove any seed before starting the game.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;tmdisplay&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Banana-apprentice&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
      },&lt;br /&gt;
      {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Pear to the Throne&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Remove 1 seed before starting the game.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;tmdisplay&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Pear to the Throne&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    ],&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;displaycondition&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
      {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;maxplayers&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: 1&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    ]&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== displaycondition vs startcondition ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;displaycondition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be used when an option should not be present in the list under certain conditions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, displaying the option which is consistent with the player count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* 2 player maps: A B C D &lt;br /&gt;
* 3 player maps: E F G H&lt;br /&gt;
* 4 player maps: I J K L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;startcondition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be used when a specific combination of option values is invalid, but the option itself still makes sense to show.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Player 1 faction: A, B, C, D, E, F, G&lt;br /&gt;
* Player 2 faction: A, B, C, D, E, F, G&lt;br /&gt;
* startcondition: both players can&#039;t be the same faction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These options should both be displayed at all times, but there are some invalid configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other difference is displaycondition affect option itself, while startcondition affect specific values selected&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== gamestartonly ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding: 1em; background: #FFCDD2; color: #B71C1C&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;WARNING:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; [https://studio.boardgamearena.com/bug?id=104 See studio bug #104]. You should &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;NEVER&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;gamestartonly&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;! Otherwise, you allow players to (unknowingly!) create a turn-based table with impossible options that can never start. Players receive no indication that the option combination they selected is invalid until the last player joins the table (hours or days later) and the game attempts to auto-start. The table won&#039;t start because of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;startcondition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, and the table options cannot be changed because it&#039;s a turn-based table, so the table must be abandoned. This is a horrible user experience. Please don&#039;t subject players to this.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the table configuration page, it won&#039;t let you select a combination which is invalid according to &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;startcondition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Doing so will show a red warning, and will revert the option to the previous value. This means you could end up in a situation where you can&#039;t easily change between certain options (requiring you to set or unset options in a specific order).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The consequence of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;gamestartonly&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; flag is that the player _can_ select an invalid combination. However, when clicking &amp;quot;Start&amp;quot;, an invalid combination will produce an error.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the easiest way to see what the difference is is with an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With a _Clans of Caledonia_ table:&lt;br /&gt;
* set to training mode&lt;br /&gt;
* set player count to 1&lt;br /&gt;
* try setting &amp;quot;Clan Auction&amp;quot; to one of the &amp;quot;On&amp;quot; options&lt;br /&gt;
* try starting the game, there&#039;s an error! Ie. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;quot;gamestartonly&amp;quot; =&amp;gt; true&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, with a _Sushi Go Party!_ table:&lt;br /&gt;
* set number of players to 7&lt;br /&gt;
* try setting &amp;quot;Sushi Go! / Sushi Go Party!&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Sushi Go!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* you can&#039;t set the option! Ie. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;quot;gamestartonly&amp;quot; =&amp;gt; false&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In code:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;100&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Option name&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;values&amp;quot;: [],&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;startcondition&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
        {&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;maxplayers&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: 2,&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;message&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;This option is available for 2 players only.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;gamestartonly&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
      ]&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== level ====&lt;br /&gt;
Note: at this moment this only have impact in fancy lobby mode, presentation of level or checkboxes are not avaiable via normal table creation ui (such as in studio, or when you click Play button in control panel)&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;100&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Option name&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;values&amp;quot;: [...],&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;level&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;major&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;base&#039;&#039;&#039; is the default value (you don&#039;t need to specify it).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;major&#039;&#039;&#039; denotes a major option, which will always be displayed on top, and with a specific UI.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;additional&#039;&#039;&#039; means this option will not be displayed by default, to unclutter the option panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
About major options:&lt;br /&gt;
* a game can only have &#039;&#039;&#039;1 major option&#039;&#039;&#039;, and of course, it must be a important game changer.&lt;br /&gt;
* the pictures will default to the standard Game Box, and can be set independently for each value, from the [[Game metadata manager]] (in the &amp;quot;Major Variants&amp;quot; section). Note: this cannot be tested from Studio as there is not studio-only Game metadata manager, to see Major Variants option - the game has to be deployed at least as alpha.&lt;br /&gt;
* the major option can have more than 2 values (there will then be an arrow to slide to the other values, carousel-like)&lt;br /&gt;
* the naming of major variant values should be concise and the values should have descriptive text (not just &amp;quot;enabled&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;disabled&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** 👍 Option name &amp;quot;Expansion&amp;quot;, option values &amp;quot;Base game&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Bigger is Better&amp;quot; =&amp;gt; Displayed as &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Expansion: Base game&amp;quot;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Expansion: Bigger is Better&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** 👎 Option name &amp;quot;Bigger is Better&amp;quot;, option values &amp;quot;Enabled&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Disabled =&amp;gt; Displayed as &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Bigger is Better: Enabled&amp;quot;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Bigger is Better: Disabled&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
About additional options:&lt;br /&gt;
* please set each option that concerns small details in this category: advanced players will find this option anyway, and it will simplify the interface of the page of your game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Option-levels.png|800px|Option levels]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== option presentation ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An option WILL be displayed as a &#039;&#039;&#039;Checkbox&#039;&#039;&#039; instead of a selector if certain conditions are met:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* option has only &#039;&#039;&#039;2 values&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* values are either (case insensitive):&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;yes&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;no&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;on&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;off&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;enabled&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;disabled&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; value still has to be specified, and can be &amp;quot;on&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;off&amp;quot; (it&#039;s actually just a difference in display).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Option-display.png|800px|Example of checkbox display]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User Preferences ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User preferences is something cosmetic about the game interface which however can create user wars, so you can satisfy all users&lt;br /&gt;
by giving them individual preferences. You should use this only if it significantly improves the interface for a large proportion of users.&lt;br /&gt;
These preferences appear in the three-line hamburger menu in the top corner of the bga menu (and also at the bottom on the page in the Options tab).  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Display game logs&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Display tooltips&amp;quot; are baked-in by default, but you can extend this list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The preference json slightly resembles options, but these are conceptually different. The numbers comes from diffrent space and do not correspond or conflict with options,&lt;br /&gt;
i.e. preference 100 has nothing to do with option 100. You can use range 100-199 with gaps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:century_preferences_menu.PNG|400px|The user preferences menu for the game Century]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;These preferences are a good place to put accessibility options - as Century did for its Colorblind Support.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;100&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Colorblind Support&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;needReload&amp;quot;: true,&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;values&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;None&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;cssPref&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;colorblind_off&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
      },&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;2&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Numbers&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;cssPref&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;colorblind_on&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
      },&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;3&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Shapes&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;cssPref&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;colorblind_shapes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    },&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;default&amp;quot;: 1&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is two ways to check/apply this. In java Script&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  if (this.getGameUserPreference(100) == 2) ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This checks if preferences 100 has selected value 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second, if cssPref specified it will be applied to the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;html&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; tag. So you can use different css styling for the preference. Note: you also need to set needReload to true for that class change to be effective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As user you have to select them from the Gear menu when game is started. On studio only dev0 account will have it actually working (bug?).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following are the parameters of preferences description array:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039; - &#039;&#039;&#039;mandatory&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name of the preference. This string is marked for translation.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;needReload&#039;&#039;&#039; - If set to true, the game interface will auto-reload after a change of the preference.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;values&#039;&#039;&#039; - &#039;&#039;&#039;mandatory&#039;&#039;&#039;. The map of values with additional parameters per value.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039; - &#039;&#039;&#039;mandatory&#039;&#039;&#039;. String representation of the numeric value.  This string is marked for translation.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;cssPref&#039;&#039;&#039; - CSS class to add to the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;html&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; tag. Currently it is added or removed only after a reload (see needReload).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;default&#039;&#039;&#039; - Indicates the default value to use for this preference (optional, if not present the first value listed is the default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Listening for preference changes and updating preference from code ===&lt;br /&gt;
The BGA framework offers red/write and callback for user preference changes. See [[Game interface logic: yourgamename.js#User preferences]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Accessing User Preferences on the server ===&lt;br /&gt;
PHP has a variable called $this-&amp;gt;player_preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
This contains a table of player preferences, ONLY accessible in setupNewGame().&lt;br /&gt;
You can use this to populate a table that you manage yourself.&lt;br /&gt;
You have to update the table when a player changes preference (and you have to hook up a listener and initiate an AJAX call out-of-turn).&lt;br /&gt;
Check the code of Agricola for details but this should work:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; In dbmodel.sql&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS `user_preferences` (&lt;br /&gt;
  `player_id` int(10) NOT NULL,&lt;br /&gt;
  `pref_id` int(10) NOT NULL,&lt;br /&gt;
  `pref_value` int(10) NOT NULL,&lt;br /&gt;
  PRIMARY KEY (`player_id`, `pref_id`)&lt;br /&gt;
) ENGINE=InnoDB DEFAULT CHARSET=utf8;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; In ggg.game.php&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
protected function setupNewGame($players, $options = array())&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
// TODO: Save $this-&amp;gt;player_preferences: key is player_id, value is array with pref_id as key and pref_value as value&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Warning: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$this-&amp;gt;player_preferences[$player_id]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be null if the player has not set any player preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: to access json values you can call:&lt;br /&gt;
   $game_preferences = $this-&amp;gt;getTablePreferences();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Warning: if you use bga undo system make sure this table is not restored from undo state, as this likely independed from it&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; In ggg.js&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
// use code for initPreferencesObserver from above example&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
onGameUserPreferenceChanged(prefId, prefValue) {&lt;br /&gt;
    if (prefId === 101 /*TODO: You probably want to send only some preferences*/) {&lt;br /&gt;
        // TODO: Code your own action in ggg.action.php and send it prefId and prefValue&lt;br /&gt;
        //       The on the server side you can save it all in the user_preferences&lt;br /&gt;
        //       table you created above.&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
},&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translations ==&lt;br /&gt;
Note that any name or description values in these JSON files are automatically added to the translation system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Migration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Previously, options and preferences were specified in a single &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;gameoptions.inc.php&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BGA has switched to a JSON format to make parsing easier on the server-side, and to avoid a reliance on PHP for static config.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The PHP format will continue to work for &#039;&#039;existing&#039;&#039; games, and although preferred, there is no need to migrate unless you want to. However, newly created games must use the new format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: once a game has been committed with a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;gameoptions.json&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file, however, it is not possible to go back without admin intervention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to migrate:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simple method:&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to studio and press Reload game options configuration&lt;br /&gt;
* It will dump json on the log window - you can take this, format it and save into 2 files (if you have both). For gamepreference.json remove option &amp;quot;200&amp;quot; - this is default common option, it should not be in your file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manual method:&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove all calls to &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;totranslate()&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, and replace with the plain string&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove any references to BGA&#039;s PHP constants, such as GAMESTATE_RATING_MODE, and replace with the plain value (in this case, 201)&lt;br /&gt;
* You can populate &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;gameinfos.json&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with the result of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;json_encode($game_options, JSON_PRETTY_PRINT)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* You can populate &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;gamepreferences.json&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with the result of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;json_encode($game_preferences, JSON_PRETTY_PRINT)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you include gameoptions.inc.php directly, to read the values, then replace those calls with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$this-&amp;gt;getTableOptions()&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$this-&amp;gt;getTablePreferences()&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; as appropriate which return arrays parsed from the JSON files&lt;br /&gt;
This message was posted to the developer Discord channel:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Game options change (Optional!)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;gameoptions.inc.php&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is now considered legacy, and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;gameoptions.json&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;gamepreferences.json&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are recommended for new projects:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The wiki and the template project have been updated: [[/en.doc.boardgamearena.com/Options and preferences: gameoptions.json, gamepreferences.json|https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/Options_and_preferences:_gameoptions.json,_gamepreferences.json]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Any questions/problems can come to me, or can be asked here.&lt;br /&gt;
* The format of the json files matches the format of the old php files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We realise there are some drawbacks (sorry!):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No comments in the JSON file, meaning you have to check the wiki for examples&lt;br /&gt;
* No PHP constants in the JSON file, meaning magic numbers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, we hope it&#039;s good for BGA because:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Simpler to parse (for robots and humans)&lt;br /&gt;
* Easier to check for errors (we could perhaps use an XSLT one day)&lt;br /&gt;
* No need to run game-specific PHP code on the metasite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Switching is totally optional, and the legacy files will still work for existing projects, and for those who know about them. &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Studio]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20904</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20904"/>
		<updated>2024-04-27T04:51:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Making more important rules bold for clarity&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; can be played as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick. Gold cards can be spent to swap players&#039; bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank. If a player played the lowest base metal card in a trick, they win a gold card of the same number (rank), if available in the gold supply. There are 2 copies each of gold cards numbered 1, 2 and 3 worth 1 point each at the end of a round; 1 copy each of 4, 5 and 6 worth 2 points; 1 copy each of 7 and 8 worth 3 points each. There are four 0 gold cards worth 0 points given to each player at the start of each round in the base game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039;. These base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the three players at the beginning of each round. The gold supply contains all gold cards from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and all gold cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two random base metal cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round. The remaining base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the four players at the beginning of each round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a &#039;&#039;&#039;base metal card from their hand&#039;&#039;&#039; whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must &#039;&#039;&#039;start with any base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039;: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. &#039;&#039;&#039;Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played&#039;&#039;&#039;. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the &#039;&#039;&#039;start player for the next trick&#039;&#039;&#039; played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with. A team&#039;s bid is compared to the combined total of tricks taken by both partners in that team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20708</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20708"/>
		<updated>2024-04-09T22:02:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Explain gold cards more&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; can be played as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick. Gold cards can be spent to swap players&#039; bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank. If a player played the lowest base metal card in a trick, they win a gold card of the same number (rank), if available in the gold supply. There are 2 copies each of gold cards numbered 1, 2 and 3 worth 1 point each at the end of a round; 1 copy each of 4, 5 and 6 worth 2 points; 1 copy each of 7 and 8 worth 3 points each. There are four 0 gold cards worth 0 points given to each player at the start of each round in the base game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039;. These base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the three players at the beginning of each round. The gold supply contains all gold cards from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and all gold cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two random base metal cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round. The remaining base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the four players at the beginning of each round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the &#039;&#039;&#039;start player for the next trick&#039;&#039;&#039; played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with. A team&#039;s bid is compared to the combined total of tricks taken by both partners in that team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20707</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20707"/>
		<updated>2024-04-09T21:51:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Explain cards are shuffled and dealt evenly each round&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; can be played as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick. Gold cards can be spent to swap players&#039; bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank. If a player played the lowest base metal card in a trick, they win a gold card of the same number (rank), if available in the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039;. These base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the three players at the beginning of each round. The gold supply contains all gold cards from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two random base metal cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round. The remaining base metal cards are shuffled and dealt evenly between the four players at the beginning of each round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the &#039;&#039;&#039;start player for the next trick&#039;&#039;&#039; played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with. A team&#039;s bid is compared to the combined total of tricks taken by both partners in that team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20698</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20698"/>
		<updated>2024-04-09T10:15:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Clarify tricks taken total is for both partners on team.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; can be played as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick. Gold cards can be spent to swap players&#039; bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank. If a player played the lowest base metal card in a trick, they win a gold card of the same number (rank), if available in the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the &#039;&#039;&#039;start player for the next trick&#039;&#039;&#039; played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with. A team&#039;s bid is compared to the combined total of tricks taken by both partners in that team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20697</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20697"/>
		<updated>2024-04-09T10:11:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Bold start player for next trick&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; can be played as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick. Gold cards can be spent to swap players&#039; bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank. If a player played the lowest base metal card in a trick, they win a gold card of the same number (rank), if available in the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the &#039;&#039;&#039;start player for the next trick&#039;&#039;&#039; played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20696</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20696"/>
		<updated>2024-04-09T09:49:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: How players get gold cards.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; can be played as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick. Gold cards can be spent to swap players&#039; bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank. If a player played the lowest base metal card in a trick, they win a gold card of the same number (rank), if available in the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the start player for the next trick played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20695</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20695"/>
		<updated>2024-04-09T09:46:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Improving readability of cards section&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; can be played as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick. Gold cards can be spent to swap players&#039; bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the start player for the next trick played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20694</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20694"/>
		<updated>2024-04-09T09:39:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Added in bullet characters as workaround for HTML lists not displaying bullets or numbers&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which players can play as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick or that players can spend to swap their bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* • The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the start player for the next trick played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# • &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* • &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* • was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* • If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* • If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20688</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20688"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T13:12:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Calrify team bid is for both members of team combined win&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which players can play as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick or that players can spend to swap their bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think both members of their team combined will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the start player for the next trick played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20687</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20687"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T12:47:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Moved Cards section for a clearer flow&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which players can play as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick or that players can spend to swap their bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think that their team will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the start player for the next trick played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20686</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20686"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T12:42:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Reduce repetition in points for tricks section&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which players can play as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick or that players can spend to swap their bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think that their team will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the start player for the next trick played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that:&lt;br /&gt;
* was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score &#039;&#039;&#039;0 points&#039;&#039;&#039; for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;two times the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;the number of tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20685</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20685"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T12:37:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Explain gold cards returned to supply&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which players can play as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick or that players can spend to swap their bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think that their team will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the start player for the next trick played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
Played &#039;&#039;&#039;gold cards are returned to the gold supply after the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; has been scored. If there are no gold cards with the same number (rank) as the lowest base metal card played to the trick but a player has played a gold card of that number to the trick, the player who played the lowest base metal card does not get a gold card of that number, as the gold card is returned to the supply after the point of checking for a gold card in the supply during trick scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score 0 points for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to two times the number of tricks they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to the number of tricks that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20684</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20684"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T12:23:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Remove unnecessary blank line&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which players can play as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick or that players can spend to swap their bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think that their team will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the start player for the next trick played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score 0 points for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to two times the number of tricks they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to the number of tricks that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20683</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20683"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T12:22:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Added three vs four player title&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Three vs Four Player Game ==&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which players can play as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick or that players can spend to swap their bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think that their team will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the start player for the next trick played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score 0 points for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to two times the number of tricks they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to the number of tricks that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20682</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20682"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T12:20:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Move explanation of 3 player individual game vs 4 player team game&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, players play individually. With four players, players play in two teams of two with each player sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which players can play as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick or that players can spend to swap their bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think that their team will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the start player for the next trick played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score 0 points for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to two times the number of tricks they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to the number of tricks that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20681</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20681"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T12:14:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Clarify end of round rule&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which players can play as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick or that players can spend to swap their bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think that their team will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. In a four player game, players sit so that each player is sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the start player for the next trick played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have already been played to the trick, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score 0 points for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to two times the number of tricks they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to the number of tricks that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20680</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20680"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T12:07:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Explain four player seating order and who starts next trick&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which players can play as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick or that players can spend to swap their bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think that their team will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. In a four player game, players sit so that each player is sat between their opponents and opposite the player on their team in clockwise order of play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply. This player will be the start player for the next trick played in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have been played, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score 0 points for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to two times the number of tricks they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to the number of tricks that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20679</id>
		<title>Gamehelpaurum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.doc.boardgamearena.com/index.php?title=Gamehelpaurum&amp;diff=20679"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T11:41:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CitadelUK: Added rules summary for Aurum&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
In Aurum, players take the role of alchemists melding base metals into gold. Aurum is a competitive, trick taking game where players must not follow the suits of previously played base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Round Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aurum plays in 2-4 rounds. At the end of each round, one or more players win a gold nugget. A player (or team) with two gold nuggets wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A round consists of the following phases:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Bidding&#039;&#039;&#039; where players predict the number of tricks they will win with a card from their hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Playing Tricks&#039;&#039;&#039; where each player plays one card. The highest card wins the trick and the lowest base metal card wins a gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039; where the player (or team) with the highest points wins a gold nugget. Points are based on tricks and gold cards won.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Pass on the Round First Player Marker&#039;&#039;&#039; where the marker of which player starts the next round is passed clockwise to the next player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cards ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of cards in Aurum:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Base Metal Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which are dealt to each player&#039;s hand at the start of each round. They are used for playing to tricks and to indicate the number of tricks a player thinks they (or their team) will win during a round. The base metal suits are: Bismuth, Copper, Phosphorus, Silver and Zinc.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Cards&#039;&#039;&#039; which players can play as a trump that always beats base metal cards when played to a trick or that players can spend to swap their bids between tricks. Gold cards indicate a number of points they are worth when kept till the end of a round with gold symbols below the number indicating their rank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With three players, there are four base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-9&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-7&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
With four players, there are five base metal suits with ranks &#039;&#039;&#039;1-10&#039;&#039;&#039; and cards in the gold supply from &#039;&#039;&#039;1-8&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two cards are not dealt to players&#039; hands and instead revealed in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra cards not dealt to players&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the table in the four player game; these cards take no part in this round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bidding ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each player must select a base metal card from their hand whose number matches the number of tricks that they think they (or their team) will win. If they win tricks to match or exceed their bid, they will score points at the end of the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Three Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid simultaneously and then reveal their bid cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Four Player Bidding ====&lt;br /&gt;
Players bid in clockwise order starting with the player with the Round First Player Marker. Players are bidding the number of tricks that they think that their team will win. Between the two cards bid by the two players on a team, &#039;&#039;&#039;only the highest card is counted as the team&#039;s bid&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trick Structure ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before each trick, players have an opportunity to &#039;&#039;&#039;change their bid&#039;&#039;&#039; by spending a gold card and choosing a card in their hand to swap with their bid card (or their partner&#039;s bid card). The gold spent is returned to the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Players each play one card to the trick&#039;&#039;&#039; in order clockwise from the start player. The start player must start with any base metal card: they cannot start a trick with a gold card. Subsequent players cannot play a card of a base metal suit that any previous player has played. Multiple players can play gold cards to the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scoring a Trick ====&lt;br /&gt;
The player who wins the trick is, in order:&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick. Gold acts as a trump that always beats base metal cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no player played a gold card, the player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;highest base metal card&#039;&#039;&#039; wins the trick.&lt;br /&gt;
* The player who played the &#039;&#039;&#039;lowest base metal card wins a gold card&#039;&#039;&#039; with the same number (number) as their played base metal card, if there is still such a card available in the gold supply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Trick Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of ties for winning a trick or gold card, the last card played wins. If all players played the same number (rank) base metal card to a trick, the last player to play wins the trick and wins the gold card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round End ====&lt;br /&gt;
If when they are due to play a card to a trick, a &#039;&#039;&#039;player has no base metal cards that they can play&#039;&#039;&#039; to the trick, they may pass. If their hand is empty or their cards in hand are all of suits that have been played, then they must pass or may optionally play a gold card, if they have one. If they pass and don&#039;t play a card, the round ends immediately, all cards in the current trick are discarded with the trick not counting as won, no player being awarded a gold card and any gold cards played to the trick not counting for player scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scoring a round ==&lt;br /&gt;
The highest scoring player (or team) will win a gold nugget. A round score is composed of two elements:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for tricks taken&#039;&#039;&#039; compared to the bid a player (or team) made. &lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Points for gold cards&#039;&#039;&#039; that were won and not used during the round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Tricks Taken ====&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;lower than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score 0 points for tricks.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly matched their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to two times the number of tricks they won.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a player (or team) won a number of tricks that was &#039;&#039;&#039;higher than their bid&#039;&#039;&#039;, they score points equal to the number of tricks that they won.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A player&#039;s bid is the number showing on the card that they bid with. A team&#039;s bid is the highest of the numbers showing on the two cards that both team members bid with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Points for Gold Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each player (or team) adds together the points (gold symbols) showing on each of the gold cards that they won during the round and didn&#039;t play to tricks or spend to change a bid. Gold cards with number (rank) 1-3 each score one point, 4-6 score two points and 7-8 score 3 points. There are two of each 1-3 gold card in the gold supply at the start of a round and one of each 4-7 card. There is also one 8 gold card in the supply in the four player game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resolving Round Ties ====&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more players or teams won the same number of points for the round, ties are broken in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
* If only one player (or team) &#039;&#039;&#039;matched their bid exactly&#039;&#039;&#039;, they win the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, the player (or team) that collected the single &#039;&#039;&#039;gold card showing the highest number&#039;&#039;&#039; (rank) wins the gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
* If still tied, all tied players (or teams) win a gold nugget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game End ==&lt;br /&gt;
The first player (or team) to have &#039;&#039;&#039;two gold nuggets&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a round wins the game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Game Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
To speed up the game, players can turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-skip change bid&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will stop the game asking if you want to change your bid at the beginning of every trick. It is recommended to switch this option off towards the end of a round (e.g. when players have 4 or less cards in hand), if you think you may want to change your bid. If you change the option during a game in the Options tab in this panel or in the hamburger menu (top right of the page), the option selected will be remembered and set to that option at the start of each round in this and future games. For convenience, you can change the option selected in the player&#039;s score panel and the option will not be remembered for future games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If players are concerned about accidentally playing an incorrect card when bidding or playing to a trick, then they can turn off &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-confirm bid and played cards&#039;&#039;&#039;. This option is in the player score panel, Options tab of this panel or player preferences in the hamburger menu (top right of page). If turned off, this will show a Confirm button for each move. (The exception is bidding in three player games, which can already be cancelled/undone.) This option is off by default to avoid unnecessarily lengthening most games.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Expert Variant ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once players are experienced with the game, they may choose to play the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expert Variant&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this variant, players do not start each round with a 0 gold card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CitadelUK</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>